‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ -‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪-‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬

‫»ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ« ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪be +ing‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪subject + to be + verb + ing‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ be :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ are,is,am‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ are , is , am‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ are,is,am‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺝ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬

‫‪now‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫‪at present‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‬

‫‪for the time being‬‬ ‫ﻼ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‪ -‬ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬

‫‪at the moment‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‬

‫‪This morning‬‬

‫‪30‬‬
‫‪This year‬‬

‫‪This week‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪look‬‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻦ‬ ‫!‪hush up‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ‬

‫‪listen‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ‬ ‫‪stop‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ‬

‫‪be careful‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺵ‬ ‫‪keep‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ‬

‫‪Listen! Someone’s knocking the door‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﻦ – ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ!‬

‫‪Look! Someone is coming.‬‬

‫‪Be careful he is eavesdropping.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺳﻤﻊ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻪ!‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ing -like-know-understand-want‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ y‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪PlayÆplaying‬‬

‫‪StudyÆstudying‬‬

‫‪CarryÆcarrying‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ e‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ‬

‫‪ be‬ﻛﻪ ‪ e‬ﺁﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Come Æcoming‬‬

‫‪Take Ætaking‬‬

‫‪Have Æhaving‬‬

‫‪31‬‬
 ‫‪Be Æbeing‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ‬

‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ)‪ (a,e,i,o,u‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪SitÆ sitting‬‬

‫‪Put Æ putting‬‬

‫‪Read Æ reading‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ ie‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ing‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ ie‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪tie Æ tying‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪die Æ dying‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪lie Æ lying‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ –ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﮐﺸیﺪﻥ‬

‫‪32‬‬
 ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪see Æ saw‬‬ ‫)ﺷﮑﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪work Æ worked‬‬ ‫)‪( ed-ied‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪do Æ did‬‬

‫‪am , is Æ was‬‬

‫‪are Æ were‬‬

‫‪have Æ had‬‬

‫‪go Æ went‬‬

‫‪come Æ came‬‬

‫‪see Æ saw‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ did‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ did‬ﻳﺎ ‪ didn’t‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪33‬‬
 ‫‪ -1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ed‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ied‬ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪ yesterday Æ‬و ‪last day‬‬

‫‪the other day Æ‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪two days ago Æ‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪ Æ‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪in +‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )‪( in 1920‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ed‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪play Æ played‬‬

‫‪stay Æ stayed‬‬

‫‪∗say Æ said‬‬

‫‪∗pay Æ paid‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ y‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ed‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ‪ ied‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪carry Æ carried‬‬

‫‪study Æ studied‬‬

‫‪try Æ tried‬‬

‫‪34‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪1367‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ‬

‫‪ -6‬ﭘﺴﺮﻩ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬

‫‪1-They helped us in the class at 2 o’clock yesterday.‬‬

‫‪2-We saw you in the park at 5 o’clock last week.‬‬
‫‪3- We wanted to go to school the other day.‬‬
‫‪4-We liked to be polite in the class in 1367 year.‬‬
‫‪5- We were tired yesterday.‬‬
‫‪6- The boy was lazy last year.‬‬

‫‪35‬‬
 :‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺢ‬
To Do
You did. Did you do?
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻤﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬

He does. Does he do?

Did he do? Yes he did.

You had to go. .‫ ﺗﻮ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ‬-1

Did you have to go? ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

You didn’t have to go ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‬-2

He has to go.

Does he have to go? ‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‬-3

He had to teach.

Did he have to teach?

. ‫ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‬-4

My father was here yesterday.

.‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬-5

Their parents were kind last year.

.‫ﻣﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‬-6

36
‫‪I was teacher last year.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ‬

‫‪They were studying when my father came in.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺩ‬

‫‪My brother was playing the piano when his teacher rang.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Their parents were watching the news when it was raining.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ when‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ )‪ (to‬ﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﺋﻴﻢ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪please Æ‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ‬

‫‪will you ( please) Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ(‬

‫‪would you Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬

‫‪could you Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ‪would you mind +‬‬

‫‪do you mind‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ you‬ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ to be‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ‪ you‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪ aren’t‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪don’t be‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻚ ‪ again‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫) ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ( ‪ ) Æ don’t go again‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ( ‪you don’t go‬‬

‫‪) Æ don’t be again‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ( ‪you aren’t‬‬ ‫) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ (‬

‫‪don’t (you) ever go (again).‬‬ ‫) ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ(‬

‫‪38‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺆﺩﺏ ﺑﺎﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻧﻨﻮﻳﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﺪ ﺍﺧﻼﻕ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -12‬ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺑﻲ ﺍﺩﺏ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪:‬‬

‫‪1-Please study here every day.‬‬

‫‪2-Please write a letter.‬‬

‫‪3-Would you please speak English.‬‬

‫‪4-Would you mind listening to the teacher.‬‬

‫‪5-Please be polite here.‬‬

‫‪39‬‬
 6-Please be happy.

7-Don’t play football here again.

8-Don’t open the door again.

9-Don’t write on the black board again.

10-Don’t be lazy again.

11-Don’t be bad temper again.

12-Don’t be rude again.

:‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬

. ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‬-1

I work here every day.

I am working here now. ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

I worked here yesterday. ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

I was working here yesterday. ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

Work here every day. ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻱ‬

.‫ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﺩ‬-2

My father will buy a car tomorrow.

.‫ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‬-3

I will pass in the next year.

.‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬-4

40
They will be here in three weeks.

.‫ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‬-5

We will win soon.

.‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺯﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ‬-6

You will be clever sooner or later.

‫ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬-7

Ali will study later.

41
 ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪Simple future tense :‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + will / shall +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ )‪ (will‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ shall‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ will‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫)‪( tomorrow‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ‬

‫‪soon‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺩﻱ‬

‫‪sooner or later‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺩ‬

‫‪three weeks‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪next +‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ ( a week/ a year/ a month‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪in+‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ will‬ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ not‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫‪ won’t‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ shan’t‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ will‬ﻳﺎ ‪ shall‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪if Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪unless‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻣﮕﺮ‬

‫‪42‬‬
whenÆ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ‬ as long as Æ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ‬

while Æ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ‬ suppose Æ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬

before Æ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬ as soon as Æ ‫ﺑﻤﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬

after Æ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ to pass Æ ‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

till Æ ‫ﺗﺎ‬

until Æ ‫ﺗﺎ‬

: ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

( I ) ‫ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬+ before + ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ‬

( II ) before + ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬

You will pass if you study.

If you study you will pass.

I will call you as soon as I get home.

As soon as I get home , I will call you.

43
 ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ )ﻛﻪ ( ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ + that +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪(1‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪I know that you come.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻲ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ‪ that‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1. 2. 3 that 1. 2. 3‬‬ ‫‪1. 2. 3 to 2. 3‬‬

‫‪I want you that you go Æ I want you to go‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ : (3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ‪ not to‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want you that you don’t go.‬‬

‫‪I want you not to go.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ not‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(to go Æ not to go‬‬

‫)‪(to be or not to be‬‬

‫‪Not to go‬‬ ‫)ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻦ(‬

‫‪Not to come‬‬

‫‪44‬‬
‫‪not to write‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ to‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪let‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬

‫‪I let you that you go. Æ I let you to go‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫‪I let you go.‬‬

‫‪make‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪I make you that you be. Æ I make you to be Æ I make you be.‬‬

‫‪see‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬

‫‪help‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪It helps to prevent‬‬

‫‪hear‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪watch‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪observe‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪feel‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪have‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪know‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬

‫‪notice‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ )‪ :(5‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻢ‬

‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ go.‬ﻳﺎ ‪I see you that you go. Æ I see you going‬‬

‫‪ go.‬ﻳﺎ ‪I saw you that you go. Æ I saw you going‬‬

‫‪45‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻮﺷﺤﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﻧﺪﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1. want you not to play football here.‬‬

‫‪2. I am happy that you are lazy.‬‬

‫‪3. They like to speak English.‬‬
‫‪4. I let you laugh here every day.‬‬
‫‪5. I saw you studying.‬‬
‫‪6. I see you listening to the teacher.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬
 ‫‪tell & say‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ say‬ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ‬

‫‪ said‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ﺑﻪ ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ‬

‫‪ tell‬ﻛﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ told‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ )ﺭﺍ( ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﮔﻔﺘﻦ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ mean‬ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ meant‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I mean you‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ tell‬از ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ say to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ‪ tell‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪to tell a lie Æ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a story /tale‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a fact Æ‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell a joke Æ‬‬ ‫ﺟﻚ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the time Æ‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell one’s name Æ‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the fortune Æ‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the difference Æ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the news Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪to tell the secret Æ‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻔﺘﻦ‬

‫‪47‬‬
 ‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪ every day‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻧﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪often Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ‬ ‫‪usually Æ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ‬

‫‪always Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ‬ ‫‪hardly Æ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬

‫‪seldom Æ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪some times Æ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬

‫‪generally Æ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﹰﺎ‬ ‫‪frequently Æ‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﺒﹰﺎ‬

‫‪scarely Æ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪rarely Æ‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ever‬ﺑﻪ ‪ never‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I always go there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪They are always late.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪They can always play.‬‬

‫‪48‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Do you often go there‬‬

‫ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ – ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Yes I often do. - I often go there.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﹰﻛﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫) ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ )(.‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﺎﮐﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ do‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬

‫‪I always do go.‬‬

‫‪I never did go.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻮﻝ ← ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﺏ ← ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪،‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ The‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ )ﺭﺍ‪ -‬ﻛﻪ – ﻛﺴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪:‬‬

‫‪a-an‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫‪any‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ – ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪She has a pen.‬‬

‫‪She has some pens‬‬

‫?‪Dose she have any pen‬‬

‫?‪Doesn’t she have any pen‬‬

‫‪ an , a‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ u‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻳﻮ( ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ )‪ (u‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺁ( ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (an‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ Æ (a‬ﻳﻮ ‪ Å u Æ‬ﺁ ‪(an) Å‬‬

‫‪a university‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ‬

‫‪50‬‬
‫‪a used car‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻬﻨﻪ‬

‫‪an umbrella‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ‬

‫‪an uncle‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻮ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ )‪ (one‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪A one story building.‬‬

‫‪A one eyed man.‬‬

‫‪A one celled animal.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ )‪ (h‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪ (a‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ )‪ (h‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ‪ an‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪an hour‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ(‬

‫‪an honest man‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻜﺎﺭ‬

‫‪an honor man‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ‬

‫‪a hand‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺖ‬

‫‪a hen‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻍ‬

‫‪a hat‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻼﻩ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ )‪ :(1‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﻫﻬﺎ – ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺟﻨﮕﻠﻬﺎ‪ -‬ﺧﻠﻴﺠﻬﺎ –ﺻﺤﺮﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ )‪ :(2‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪The god, The sun, The earth, The moon, The sky‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪The north‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫‪The south‬‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫‪The east‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻕ‬

‫‪The west‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺏ‬

‫‪The north pole‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺐ ﺷﻤﺎﻝ‬

‫‪The south pole‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺐ ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻫﺒﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪The bible‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻞ‬

‫‪The koran‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺁﻥ‬

‫‪The torah‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺭﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ made of‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Butter is made of the milk.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ )‪ (′s‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ‪ The‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﹰﺎ ‪ The‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪The United States of America‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬

‫‪The Soviet Union‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺟﻤﺎﻫﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﺭﻭﻱ‬

‫‪The Nether land‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻨﺪ‬

‫‪52‬‬
 ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺸﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬

‫‪mine‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ours‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ‬

‫‪yours‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪yours‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ‬

‫‪his‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ)ﻣﺬﻛﺮ(‬

‫‪theirs‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪hers‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ )ﻣﺆﻧﺚ(‬

‫‪its‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ )ﺷﻲﺀ(‬

‫‪It is my‬‬ ‫‪book‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫‪it is mine book.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﮑﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﮑﻲ‬

‫‪53‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ‬

‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪(of‬‬

‫‪the door of the class‬‬ ‫ﺩ ِﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪the legs of the table‬‬ ‫ﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ‪Å‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ِ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻛﺴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺑﻪ )‪(′s‬‬

‫‪Ali’s mother‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩ ِﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪Ali’s book‬‬ ‫ﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪Å‬‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎ ِ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ s‬ﻳﺎ ‪ es‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ies‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ )‪ (′s‬ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (,‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﻭ )‪(s‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪the students’ parents‬‬ ‫‪Å‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ (′s‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪the children’s parents‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪Å‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )‪ (′s‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪today’s news‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪tomorrow’s news‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ‪Å‬‬

‫‪54‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ »ﺍﺯ« ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬

.‫ ﺍ ِﺯ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬: (‫ )ﺍﺯ‬of -1

One of the students

Five of the chairs

Ten of the cars

: ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ‬: from -2

Take the knife from the child.

Take the book from the desk.

I work here from morning to / till night.

I walk from here to/till my house.

from here to my house is 2 kilometers.

to be from Æ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

to come from Æ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻫﻞ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

:‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬: out of -3

I go out of the class.

I pulled him out of the pool.

out of sight , out of mind .‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻓﺖ‬

my car is out of order .‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

out of the work .‫ﺑﻴﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

out of the practice .‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

55
 ‫‪ : through -4‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The river passes through this village.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I can see through the glass.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪Don’t look through the pipe.‬‬

‫ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪The water passes through the pipe.‬‬

‫‪ : than -5‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ er‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ‪ more‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪old → elder → eldest‬‬ ‫) ﭘﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ (‬

‫‪old → older → oldest‬‬

‫)ﻗﺸﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺸﻨﮓﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ‪beautiful → more beautiful → the most beautiful‬‬

‫‪My brother is older than me.‬‬

‫‪: since -6‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ – ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ – ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ – ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Since you are my friend I want to help you.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Since he is a good worker, I want to employ him.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : how -7‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺠﺎ‪ -‬ﭼﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫?‪How do you know my name‬‬

‫‪56‬‬
How do you know my address?

How do you know my telephone number?

. ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥ‬to buy Æ at -8

. ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻥ‬to buy Æfrom

I bought the book from Ali.

I bought the book from my father.

I bought the book from my teacher.

I bought the bread at the baker’s.

I buy the meat at the butcher’s

57
 Future Continuous Tense « ‫» ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬will ‫ ﻭﻳﺎ‬shall ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

.‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬

Subject + shall /will + be + V.ing

I shall be working
I will be working
He/she/it will be working
You will be working
We shall be working
We will be working
They will be working
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬will ‫ ﻭ‬shall ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬: ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

.‫ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬I, We ‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ‬

I shan’t be studying. you won’t be going swinming.

Shall I be seeing you tomorrow?
Will you be coming here tomorrow?
Shan’t I be working all day?
Won’t they be watching TV tonight ?

:‫ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬:‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

: ‫ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬-‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬

.‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬

We will be sitting in the class and studying tomorrow morning.

: ‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ‬-‫ﺏ‬

I will be seeing you tomorrow .‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺖ‬

58
We will be having a test next week .‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬

: ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

all + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬Æ all day tomorrow

‫ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬+ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬Æ This time next session

At 7 o’clock next session

At 9 o’clock tomorrow/ tonight

: ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬

.‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬-1

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‬-2
.‫ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﻤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻪ‬-3
.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻲ‬-4
.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬-5

1- I had to be sure that that book didn’t belong to you.

2- I had to do every thing that he told me.
3- He said that he couldn’t help me in this time.
4- I didn’t know that you wanted to bother me.
5-He thought that you might not come here.

59
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻣﺸﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ؟ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪1- Will you be working all the day tomorrow‬‬

‫‪2- What will you be doing at 8 o’clock tonight? I am watching TV.‬‬
‫‪3- I will come at three o’clock good!/well! I will be waiting for you.‬‬
‫‪4- We had better go out because Reza will be playing the piano.‬‬
‫‪5- Do you think when we get there, they will be waiting for us.‬‬

‫‪60‬‬
 ‫‪Sequence of tenses‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺵ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺶ ﻣﻴﮕﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He said that he had to do whatever his elder brother said.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He knew well that he didn’t have the right to fire me.‬‬

‫‪61‬‬
 ‫» ‪«Used to‬‬
‫ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬

‫) ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ – ﺍﻭﻧﺮﻭﺯﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﻬﺎ( ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪He used to smoke a lot.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Did you use to study here‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪I didn’t use to see him very often.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪else where :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪someone else :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪ : Used to‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻧﺎﻇﻢ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬

‫‪He used to be the dean of high school but he isn’t now ,again.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ used to‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ would‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪used to/would Æ‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ‪ -‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫‪used to Æ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬

‫‪else where :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫‪62‬‬
‫‪someone else :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪Whenever I needed some money, I used to/would go to my mother.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He used to work else where.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ؟‬

‫?‪Did your father use to have a car‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻴﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I used to sleep late, but I get up early now.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪We used to live another the city.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Some one else used to be our teacher.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪:‬‬

‫‪ to get used to‬ﻳﺎ‪to be used to‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ / ing‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ /‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪To be used to‬‬

‫‪ To get used to‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪63‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪to take a nap :‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬

‫‪to do exercises :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪or else :‬‬ ‫ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪She is used to cats.‬‬

‫‪She is used to her mother.‬‬
‫‪She is used to taking a nap after lunch.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌــﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳــﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺿــﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳــﺎ ﻓﻌــﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷــﺖ ‪ used‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳــﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟــﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑــﺮ ﻛﻠﻤــﻪ‬

‫‪ accustomed‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Some of you aren’t used to standing in front of the class but don’t worry, gradually‬‬
‫‪you will get used to it.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺻ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺧﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪64‬‬
 .‫ ﺍﻭﻟﺶ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‬-4
.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬-5
.‫ ﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ – ﻧﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺵ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ‬،‫ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬-6
.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﻮﻧﻪ‬-7

1. I Don’t smoke so much, or else you will get used to it.

2. I’m not tired at all. I’m used to working for hours.
3. He is used to doing exercises every morning.
4. At first, we weren’t used to this teacher but , at last we got used to him.
5. He is used to take a nap after lunch.
6. Are you used to living in this area. No I am not (used to living here)
7. Don’t worry, at last you get used to it.
8. He is used to reading book before sleeping.

65
 ‫« ‪Question tag‬‬ ‫» ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ‬

‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ) ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ ‪ -‬ﻣﮕﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪ -‬ﻭ ﻫﺎﻥ(ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ؟‬

‫?‪We must obey the regulations , mustn’t we‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻬﻤﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪He can trust us , can’t he‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻭﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻡ؟‬

‫?‪I believed what you said , didn’t I‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﮓ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪She isn’t afraid of the dog, is she‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺗﻬﺎﻡ ﺩﺯﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻧﺪ – ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪They didn’t accuse him of stealing, did they‬‬

‫ﺗﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﺖ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﻨﮓ‪ -‬ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪You don’t like to be called stupid, do you‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 1‬ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ am not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ aren’t I‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ am I not‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪66‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻭﻓﺎﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪I am faithful to ypu ,aren’t I‬‬

‫?‪I am faitful to you, am I not‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫?‪I am kind to the children, aren’t I‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎ‬

‫‪ there‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﭘﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‬

‫?‪Money doesn’t bring luck, does it‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻤﻮﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪The students are willing to stay more, aren’t they‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Ali reza is waiting outside, isn’t he‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪There is no class today, is there‬‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫?‪That book doesn’t belong to you, does it‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 3‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Hardly / Never / Barely / No / Seldom/ None/ Rarely/ Little / Scarcely / Few‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﺳﻪ؟ ﻣﮕﻪ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪67‬‬
Money goes nowhere nowadays, does it?

.‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ‬

Leyla never tells lise, dose she?

shall we ‫ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ( ﺿـﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺳـﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷـﺎﻥ‬let’s ‫ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬: 4 ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ‬

: ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺎﻱ؟‬

Let’s go to tell him every thing , shall we?

Let’s study together, shall we?

:‫ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬tag : 5 ‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ‬

Will you- would you- can you- could you

Do me a favor, will you?

Come and see us, will you?
Don’t be so stingy, will you?

68
 ‫‪Avoid Repatition‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ an‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ one‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ Any & some .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑـﺎ ‪ no‬ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ) ﻫـﻢ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ none‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ too‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪ either‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to buy a car.‬‬

‫‪a/an‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫‪one, too‬‬
‫‪I want to buy one, too.‬‬

‫‪I like some cold drink.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪Some‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪some, too‬‬
‫‪I like some, too.‬‬

‫‪I don’t have any change.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪any‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪any, either‬‬ ‫‪I don’t have any, either.‬‬

‫‪no‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪We have no class today.‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬
‫‪none, either‬‬
‫‪We have none, either.‬‬

‫‪69‬‬
to know of: ‫ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

to be willing: ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

party : ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‬.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‬-1

I want to buy some fruit , I want to buy some too.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬-2

He has a lot of good friends in this class, I have some too

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬-3

I have no time to answer the telephone , he doesn’t have any either.

.‫ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬. ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‬-4

I know of a good doctor, I know of one too

.‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻧﺪ‬-5

They arent willing to go to that party , either.

70
 ‫‪The additions‬‬ ‫» ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ «‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﻫﻢ _ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ « ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ Æ so +‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬

‫‪ +too‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ Æ‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ Æ neither +‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

‫‪ + either‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ Æ‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺳﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is in a good mood today, so am I/ I am too.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺵ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪He used to study here, so did his brother/ his brother did too.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ – ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪He doesn’t have to work with you, neither do the workers/ the workers don’t either.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪He won’t attend the class tomorrow, his friend won’t either/ neither will his friend.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪I thanked him, so did ali.‬‬

‫‪71‬‬
 .‫ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻼﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﺍﺷﺶ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬-6

He didn’t say hello to me, neither did his brother.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬-7

He is one of my old friends , so is ali .

.‫ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬، ‫ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬-8

We will have a test next week , so will they.

.‫ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬، ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﻧﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻭ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻢ‬-9

I can’t understand your words well , neither can he.

72
 ‫‪CAN‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗـﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ can‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ » ‪ « will be able to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫) ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ( ‪ can Æ will be able to‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫) ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ – ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ( ‪ can Æ can‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪You can come with me tomorrow, provided you ask your father’s permission.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭘﺎﻳﻢ ﺑﺪ ﺟﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻢ ﻓﺮﺩﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪My foot hurts painfully, I won’t be able to play on the team tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪MUST Æ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ must‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬

‫‪ will have to‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ must Æ Will have to‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ(‬

‫‪ must Æ Must‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ(‬

‫‪73‬‬
 ‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ) ﻭﺍﻻ ( ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪You must do what I say, or else I will fire you.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪If you want to pass in the university enterance examination , you will have to study‬‬
‫‪hard.‬‬

‫‪WANT‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ will want‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼـﻤﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ to be going to‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩﻭ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪want +‬‬

‫‪expect‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺶ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪Want +‬‬
‫‪want‬‬
‫‪intend‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪to be going to +‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪need‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ‪will want +‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ – ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ – ﺍﺯﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻡ ﭘﻮﻟﻢ ﺭﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪74‬‬
I will want my money next week - I’m going to buy a car- I want you to pay my
money back.

75
 ‫‪Some &any‬‬

‫‪ some -1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻲ – ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻔﻬـﻮﻡ ) ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭﻱ –‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻲ – ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑـﻪ ‪ any‬ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I want to buy some books.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﺮﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪some people say that he is crazy.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪There is some cold water in the jar.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫?‪why didn’t you eat any fruit‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻱ؟‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I don’t want any of you to fail.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ‪ some‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪You look thirsty , do you want some water‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 2‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ‪ any‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫?‪would you like some more tea‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ : 3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪You should have a good command of english because some day , some student may‬‬
‫‪ask you some question that you can’t answer.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺴﻠﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ – ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ( – ﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻱ ) ﻧﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ( ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳـﻚ‬

‫ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ any : 4‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪76‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﭼﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ؟ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪What would you like for lunch? Any thing you like.‬‬

‫‪77‬‬
 ‫» ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ «‬

‫‪some body Æ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬

‫‪some one‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ – ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬

‫‪some thing‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪some where Æ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪some place Æ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ – ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ some‬ﺍﺯ ‪ every‬ﻳﺎ ‪ any‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪every body‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪every one‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ – ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪every thing‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪every where Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬

‫‪every place‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ no‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ some‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪no body‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪no one‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ‬

‫‪no thing‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰ‬

‫‪no where‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫‪no place‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪some body / every body / nobody / any body → works‬‬

‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ’s‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ else‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ’s‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Some body‬‬
‫‪every body‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ ’s +‬‬

‫‪no body‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ else’s +‬‬

‫‪any body‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ‪ some‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ‪ no‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ no‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪ any‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Somebody knows him.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫‪Nobody knows him.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He knows somebody.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺭﺍ‬

‫‪He knows nobody.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫‪He doesn’t know anybody.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫?‪Is anybody going to say anything‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﮕﻔﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬

‫‪Nobody told me anything yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻔﻬﻤﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬

‫‪I want every body to understand this matter.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬

‫‪Some body’s brother said some thing else.‬‬

‫‪79‬‬
Some body else’s brother said some thing else.
.‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬ -5

We are going to visit some where else.

:‫ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬some ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ‬

some body/some one ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﻲ‬Æ some people ‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ‬

some thing ‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ‬Æ some things ‫ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬

some where/some place ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬Æ some places ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬

:‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬.‫ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬other ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ‬: Else

some body else ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other people ‫ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some one else ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other people ‫ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some thing else ‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬Æ some other things ‫ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some where else ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬Æ some other places ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

some place else ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ‬Æ some other places ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬

.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬what ‫ ﺍﺯ‬some ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬

what other people? ‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

80
what other things? ‫ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

what other places? ‫ﭼﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ؟‬

:‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬

some body else / some one else Æ who else? ‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ‬

some thing else Æ what else? ‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﭼﻲ‬

some where else/ some place else Æ where else? ‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﺠﺎ‬

:‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬who else’s ‫ ﺍﺯ‬whose else ‫ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬who else ‫ ﺍﺯ‬whom else ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻪ ﻛﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻡ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻲ؟‬ -1

What other people are you going to invite for dinner?

‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ -2

Who else’s car is outside?

‫ﭼﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ؟‬ -3

What other things does he know?

‫ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﻛﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ؟‬ -4

Who else liked to come here with you?

‫ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ؟‬ -5

Who else’s brother knows this matter?

81
 ‫» ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ «‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ this‬ﻭ ‪ that‬ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ these‬ﻭ ‪ those‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺘﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪/ ’s‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ‪ + of +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪this,that,these,those +‬‬

‫‪This book of Ali’s.‬‬

‫‪This book of mine.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺗﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫‪I already know this brother of yours.‬‬

‫ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻢ؟‬ ‫‪-2‬‬

‫?‪May I borrow those two english books of yours‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺮ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺁﻗﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺫﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬

‫‪This son of Ali’s always bothers us.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪These students of ours like to write more persian sentences.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪One student of mine wants to know the fact.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪This teacher of ours sometimes doesn’t listen to our words.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﻼﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪82‬‬
Some of your classmates decide to come here next Friday.
.‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺑﺸﻪ‬-8

This elder brother of yours can make friends with that good student or friend of mine.

83
 ‫‪possesive forms‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬

‫‪ of -3‬ﻭ ‪′s‬‬

‫‪ : own -4‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ـ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪His father owns a factory.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I used to own a bicycle.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪:‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ own‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫?‪whose car is it‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻪ؟‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻣﻪ ‪that is my own car.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ : belong to :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪This fountain pen belongs to me.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫?‪Whom does this fountain pen belong to‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪84‬‬
 ‫‪Putting two sentences together‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ keep‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ )ﻛﻪ( ﺑـﻪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺁﻳـﺎ(‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ if‬ﻳﺎ ‪ whether‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫» ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪« .‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺑﻪ )‪ ( or not‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whether‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ )‪ ( or not‬ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whether‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to know if you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬

‫‪I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬
‫‪I want to know whether or not you will come here tomorrow on Friday.‬‬
‫‪I want to know whether you will come here tomorrow on Friday or not.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟‬

‫‪85‬‬
 ‫» ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ «‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ) ﮔﻔﺘﻲ‪ -‬ﮔﻔﺘﻴﺪ – ﻓﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ -‬ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﺪ ( ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ‪did‬‬

‫‪ you say‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ did you say‬ﺗـﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑـﺮ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫?‪Where are you going‬‬ ‫ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟‬

‫?‪Where did you say, you are going‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ؟‬

‫? ‪How much money do you have on you‬‬ ‫ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ؟‬

‫?‪How much money did you say you have on you‬‬ ‫ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ؟‬

‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﭙﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ » ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ « ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ » ‪ « do you think‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﻬﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫? ‪Who is he‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫?‪Who do you think he is‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫? ‪How old are you‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﺘﻪ ؟‬

‫?‪How old do you think I am‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻟﻤﻪ ؟‬

‫‪86‬‬
 ‫» ‪« self‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ‬

‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ » ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ « ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Reflexive pronouns‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬

‫‪myself‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪ourselves‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪yourself‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺕ‬ ‫‪yourselves‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﭼﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ؟‬

‫?‪Why didn’t you introduce yourself‬‬

‫ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I think she is crazy, she is talking to herself.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪87‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮ ﺧﻮﺩﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺯﺩﻱ ؟‬

‫‪You told it to me, yourself.‬‬

‫‪You, yourself told it to me.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪They invited us themselves.‬‬

‫‪They themselves invited us.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ by‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ » ‪ « all by‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﭘﺴﺮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪My son is old enough to go to school by himself.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is sitting at the door all by himself and crying.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ‪ self‬ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ(‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ to‬ﻭ ‪ for‬ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I take the books with me/ myself‬‬

‫‪she has some money on her/ herself‬‬

‫‪close the window behind you/ yourself‬‬

‫‪she made address for herself‬‬

‫‪I read the text to myself‬‬

‫‪88‬‬
 ‫‪Here & There‬‬
‫‪ here‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭ ‪ there‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Here‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ‪+‬‬

‫‪There‬‬

‫‪Here‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+‬‬

‫‪There‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Here I am.‬‬ ‫) ﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ – ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺷﻢ (‬

‫‪Here you are.‬‬ ‫) ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎ – ﺩﻳﺪﻱ (‬

‫‪Here it is .‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ (‬

‫‪There they are.‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ (‬

‫‪There are the children‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺷﻦ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ (‬

‫‪Here comes the bus.‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ (‬

‫‪There goes your fathre.‬‬ ‫) ﺍﻭﻧﺎﻫﺎﺵ ﭘﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻴﺎﺩ(‬

‫‪89‬‬
 ‫» ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻓﻲ «‬

‫‪Help your self:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬

‫‪you first:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(‬

‫‪after you:‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ )ﺩﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ(‬

‫‪ladies first:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻭﻝ – ﺧﺎﻧﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﺮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪please be seated:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪go on:/ go ahead‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫‪who is speaking:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ there is‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺍﺯ ‪there are‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪There is a pen in my pocket , come and take it.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪When I came in, there were two pens on my desk.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺦ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪There is some cold water in the refrigerator.‬‬

‫‪90‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻲ؟‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺑﭙﺮﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- I want to know whether you are going to buy or rent the house.‬‬
‫‪2- Ask him if he can lend you some money.‬‬
‫‪3- I’m not sure whether he will come to the meetting with me or not.‬‬
‫‪4- He lives in this small home by him self.‬‬
‫‪5- I wish I could see my self as others see me.‬‬

‫‪91‬‬
 ‫» ‪« it‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ it‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺋﺐ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬

‫ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪It is hot today.‬‬

‫‪It is cold today.‬‬
‫‪It was raining.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪It is sunny.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hurry up ! it is getting late .‬‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﻪ ﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪What time is it ? it is five to two.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ? ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪2‬‬

‫‪What time is it ? it is five to two.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪it is far.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪How far is it from here‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟‬

‫‪it is about 5 miles.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪92‬‬
 :‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬: ‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬-4

.‫ﻛﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Who is it at the door? It must be Ali.

: ‫ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬-5

it + is / was / will be + ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ ( for + ‫ ) ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬+‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬

.‫ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

It is easy.
It is easy to speak English.
It is easy for you to speak English.

:‫ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬it -6

That is it ‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﻪ‬ It is a pity : ‫ﺍﻓﺴﻮﺱ ﺣﻴﻒ ﺷﺪ‬

It pays well/ it is worth it: ‫ﻣﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ – ﺍﺭﺯﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ Be it so : ‫ﺁﻣﻴﻦ – ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻪ‬

take it easy: ‫ﺑﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ – ﺳﺨﺖ ﻧﮕﻴﺮ‬ it is time: ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ‬

it makes no difference : ‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‬

it is no Use/ Good + ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ‬+ ing ‫ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬،‫ﺑﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

It isn’t up to you ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬

It is none of your business ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬

93
 ‫ﺻﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ‪ 16‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪1 I take.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I am taking.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I have taken.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (‬

‫‪4. I have been taking .‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ) ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ (‬

‫‪1. I will take.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I will be taking.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I will have taken.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪4. I will have been taking.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪1. I would take.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫‪2. I would be taking.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I would have been taking.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪4. I would have taken.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪1. I took.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪2. I was taking.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪3. I had taken.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪4. I had been taking.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪94‬‬
 ‫» ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ «‬

‫‪ = along -1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ = across‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I went across the street.‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I saw him walking along the street yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻧﺪﻭﻳﭻ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻲ ﺁﻧﻄﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪There is a sandwich shop across the street.‬‬

‫‪ : against -2‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺿﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪They voted against us.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪It is against regulations.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ by‬ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ in‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ‪ on‬ﻫﻢ‬

‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺩﻭ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ on‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪By bus , By taxi , By car , By subway , By plane‬‬

‫) ‪By land , By sea , By air , By train ( rail road‬‬
‫‪in/on a bus‬‬
‫‪in the car , in my car‬‬
‫‪on a bicycle , on a horse‬‬

‫‪95‬‬
 ‫‪ inside : outside # inside -4‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀـﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ‪ out side‬ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻼﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪It is hotter inside the class than outside.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪The door is locked from inside.‬‬

‫‪in # out , into # out of -5‬‬

‫‪ in‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﺩﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻱ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺳـﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ into‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪ out # in‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪out of # into‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪the student are in class.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺳﻨﺪ‬

‫‪come in.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮ‬

‫‪go out.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫‪come into the class.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻼﺱ‬

‫‪go out of the class.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺮﻭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﭘﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮ ﻭ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻏﺮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He jumped into the pool with his clothes on and pulled the drowning boy out of the‬‬
‫‪pool.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ ‪ in‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪96‬‬
in the room , in the office ‫ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‬

in the yard , in the gardan ‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ‬

in the river , in the sea ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬

.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‬in ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬there , here ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬:‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‬

Come in here. ‫ﺑﻴﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬

Don’t smoke in there . ‫ﺍﻭﻧﺠﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺶ‬

to eat in. ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬

to eat out. ‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ‬

to be in. ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

to be out. ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬

to let in. ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬

to let out. ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

to breathe in. ‫ﺩﻡ‬

to breathe out. ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻡ‬

97
 ‫‪ : at -6‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ) ﻛﻨﺎﺭ – ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ – ﺩﻡ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ table , desk‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻡ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is sitting at the window and watching out.‬‬

‫ﺑﺸﻴﻦ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Sit at your desk and teach.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ in :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ – ‪ at‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬

‫‪The plane will land in Tehran at Mehrabad airport.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ at :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ‪ in -‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬

‫‪He works at the oil company in accounting department.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ » ‪ « office‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﻧﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Mr Jones is somewhere at the office but not in his office.‬‬

‫‪ : on -7‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪Don’t sit on the floor ! sit on the chair.‬‬

‫‪: over & above -8‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ ‪over‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ above‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻣﺘﻀﺎﺩ ‪ under # over‬ﻭ ‪ below # above‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪98‬‬
 ‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻂ؟‬: 1‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬

Where should I write my name? over the line or under it .

.‫ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‬: 2‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬

There are four lights above our heads.

‫ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﺖ ﭼﻴﻪ ؟‬: 3‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬

What is it under your foot

99
 ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ( ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : A‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺳﺖ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ For ،‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ ﻧﻤـﯽ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Õ‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I have known him for two years.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪He has had this car for five years.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : B‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺍﺯ « ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ »ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ) ﺍﺯ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ‪ since‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ +‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ Õ‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪He has been here since two o’clock.‬‬

‫‪100‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He hasn’t gone to school since last week.‬‬

‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺍﻡ ـ ﺍﻱ ـ ﺍﺳﺖ ـ ﺍﻳﻢ ـ ﺍﻳﺪ ـﺎﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I haven’t notified them.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻡ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪:for -1‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪for +‬‬

‫‪for two weeks.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪for the last/ past +‬‬

‫‪for the last two weeks.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫‪: since .2‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪since +‬‬

‫‪since yesterday‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫‪101‬‬
 since + last + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

since last week ‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬

‫ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ‬: since / since then/ever since -3

.‫ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ‬

He left for England two weeks ago and I haven’t heard from him since/ since then/
ever since.

.4

‫ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬+ since + ‫ ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬I )

it is + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ since + ‫ ( ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬II )

.‫( ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬II) ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ‬since ‫( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬I) ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‬

.‫ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ‬: ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬

It has been three months since we started this term.

It is three months since we started this term.

102
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪1- He has been very upset since his friend died.‬‬

‫‪2- We have studied English for two terms but we can’t speak.‬‬
‫‪3- He hasn’t eaten anything since morning.‬‬
‫‪4- He has taught mathematics in this school for three years.‬‬
‫‪5- He has been here for an hour and a half.‬‬

‫‪ : recently- lately .5‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ – ﺗﺎﺯﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪He has recently / lately bought a new car.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪ -‬ﺍﺑﺪﹰﺍ‪ -‬ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫‪ : ever-never .6‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‪ -‬ﺍﺻ ﹰ‬

‫‪ ever‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ never‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪103‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ؟ ﻧﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫? ‪Have you ever been to England‬‬

‫‪No, I haven’t ever been to England.‬‬
‫‪No, I have never been to England.‬‬

‫‪ .7‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺎﺿـﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪So far‬‬
‫‪by now‬‬
‫‪up to now‬‬
‫‪up till now‬‬
‫‪up to the present time.‬‬

‫‪I have reviewed this lesson twice so far.‬‬

‫‪ : already .8‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻈـﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳـﺖ ﻣـﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪We are late , the bell has already gone/ rung.‬‬

‫‪ : just .9‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ – ﭼﻨﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﻪ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I have just finished my work.‬‬

‫‪104‬‬
‫‪ : yet .10‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ » ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ « ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ ﻭ‬

‫‪ not‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ not‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ؟‬

‫? ‪Have you notified them yet‬‬

‫ﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪No, I haven’t notified them yet.‬‬

‫‪No, I have not yet notified them.‬‬
‫‪ : yet .11‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪ -‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﻧﻪ – ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪don’t do that yet.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻭ ﻧﻜﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬

‫‪don’t tell them anything yet.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﮕﻮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌ ﹰ‬

‫‪ : still .12‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ – ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ‪ -‬ﻫﻢ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌـﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ still‬ﺑﻪ ‪ anymore/ any longer‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I used to study English.‬‬

‫‪Do you still study English.‬‬
‫‪No , I don’t study English anymore/any longer.‬‬

‫‪105‬‬
 ‫» ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ « ) ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ (‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : A‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ » ﺑﻮﺩ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ» ﺑﻮﺩ « ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ for‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤـﻲ‬

‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪:A‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ » +‬ﺑﻮﺩ « ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ Å‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ + For +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ : 1‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had known him for two years.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ : 2 /‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He hadn’t eaten anything for three days when we took him to the doctor.‬‬

‫‪ : B‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻡ – ﺑﻮﺩﻱ – ﺑﻮﺩ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﻢ – ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ – ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ : 1/‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He said ( that ) he had notified you before.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ : 2/‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪I thought ( that ) you had understood every thing.‬‬

‫‪106‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ‪:‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Subject + had + past participle‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + when/before +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪I had gone when/ before you came in‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻣﺪﻱ ﺗﻮ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ + after +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪I come in after you had gone.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ + since +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺗﻮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪You had gone since I had arrived. .‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻓﻮﺯﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had taken no examination since I had failed.‬‬

‫‪107‬‬
 ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗـﺎ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﻃـﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ) ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪(by‬ﺗﺎ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ (For) +‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ + by +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + will have been + verb + ing+ for +‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪We will have been studying for two hours by eight o’clock.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪We will have been living in tehran for ten years by next month.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪Will‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬

‫‪108‬‬
 ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ" ﺑﻮﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ( For ) +‬ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ Å‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ + before/when +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪Subject + had been + verb + ing + for +‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻭﻣﺪﻱ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had been teaching for half an hour when you came.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I had been doing the cooking for two hours before you called.‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ before, when‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪109‬‬
talkative : ‫ﭘﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ crowded : ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬

intelligent : ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺵ‬ taciturn : ‫ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻑ‬

ugly : ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬ rich : ‫ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ‬

considerable : ‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮ – ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬

110
 ‫‪adjective‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪careful student .‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪my new green book.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to be +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to get +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to turn +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to become +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to grow +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + to make +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻮﺩﻥ – ﺷﺪﻥ – ﮔﺸﺘﻦ – ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻥ ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺒﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑـﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪link‬‬

‫‪ verb‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪My father grew angry .‬‬

‫‪In spring the leaves turn green‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻬﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Today the weather got cold .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪. ( .‬‬

‫‪Seem / Appear/ Look/ Sound/ Taste / Smell / Feel‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪+‬‬

‫‪111‬‬
 ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪he looks( angrily ) angry.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪the soup tastes ( unusually ) unusual.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﭖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ‪ this, that‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪This book Æ‬‬ ‫‪These books .‬‬

‫‪That book Æ‬‬ ‫‪Those books .‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen is as tall as Susan.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺪ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪not so‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪Hellen is as tall as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is not so tall as Susan.‬‬

‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ) ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪112‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ )‪ ( than‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷـﺎﻥ‬

‫‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is taller than Susan.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ) ‪ ( more‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪My book is more interesting than yours .‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﹰﺍ ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻼ ‪ :‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ ﺁﻣﻮﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤـﻪ‬

‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ )ﺗﺮﻳﻦ( ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ‪ est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is the tallest student in the class .‬‬

‫ﻭﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ‪ most‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬

‫‪My book is the most interesting book in the library.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺼﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪er‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ est‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬

‫‪busy → busier than → the busiest‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ‪ more‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ most‬ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Active / more active than / the most active‬‬

‫‪Comic / more comic than / the most comic‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪:‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪113‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

good – well better than the best

bad - ill worse than the worst

much
many More than the most

Little Less than the least

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ‬ elder ------ the eldest

old
‫ﻓﺮﺩ – ﺷﺨﺺ‬ older than the oldest
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬ Farther than the farthest
far
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ Further than the furthest

114
 ‫‪The same as‬‬
‫‪ : same‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ )‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ – ﻳﻚ ( ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen and Jane live in the same street.‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( er , re , le , ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﻣـﻲ ﺩﻫـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ most , more‬ﻫـﻢ ﺗﻔﻀـﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪more narrow than‬‬ ‫‪the most narrow‬‬

‫‪narrow‬‬ ‫‪narrower than‬‬ ‫‪the narrowest‬‬
‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪more simple than‬‬ ‫‪the most simple‬‬
‫‪simple‬‬ ‫‪simpler than‬‬ ‫‪the simplest‬‬
‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪more clever than‬‬ ‫‪the most clever‬‬
‫‪clever‬‬ ‫‪cleverer than‬‬ ‫‪the cleverest‬‬
‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪more obscure than‬‬ ‫‪the most obscure‬‬
‫‪obscure‬‬ ‫‪obscurer than‬‬ ‫‪the obscurest‬‬

‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻣﻼﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ happy‬ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻥ ‪ er,est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ‪y‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ i‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪happy → happier than → the happiest‬‬

‫‪115‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ wide‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ st , r‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Wide Æ wider than Æ the widest‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﻜـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻲ‬

‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ big‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ er‬ﻭ ‪ est‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺑـﻲ ﺻـﺪﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Big Æ bigger than Æ the biggest‬‬

‫‪crowded‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﻍ‬ ‫‪a pair of shoes‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ ﻛﻔﺶ‬

‫‪busy‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﺎﺭ – ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪trousers‬‬ ‫ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ‬

‫‪noisy‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪scissors‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﭽﻲ‬

‫‪glass‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬ ‫‪ball point pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫‪cane‬‬ ‫ﻧﯽ ‪ -‬ﻗﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺷﻨﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪fountain pen‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: the same‬‬

‫) ﻣﺜﻞ – ﺷﺒﻴﻪ – ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same as‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ‬

‫( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ‪ like‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Your shoes are the same as mine.‬‬

‫‪116‬‬
 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ the same‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ + as‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪the same +‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪the‬‬

‫‪ same‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is as old as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is the same age as Susan.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪tall -‬‬ ‫‪big‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‬ ‫‪size‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬

‫‪long‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪length‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ‬

‫‪wide‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻦ‬ ‫‪width‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎ‬

‫‪deep‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪depth‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ‬

‫‪old‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻦ – ﭘﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪age‬‬ ‫ﺳﻦ‬

‫‪high‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪height‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬

‫‪117‬‬
 ‫‪adverb‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪sincere‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫‪sincerely‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﺼﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪quick‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪quickly‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬

‫‪careful‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪carefully‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen speak slowly .‬‬

‫‪Hellen apeaks English slowly .‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼً ‪:‬‬

‫‪He left the room quickly .‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ly‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Fast‬‬ ‫‪Hard‬‬ ‫‪Short‬‬ ‫‪Long‬‬

‫‪Little‬‬ ‫‪Much‬‬ ‫‪Late‬‬ ‫‪Early‬‬
‫‪Near‬‬ ‫‪Far‬‬ ‫‪Still‬‬ ‫‪Just‬‬
‫‪Enough‬‬ ‫‪Straight‬‬ ‫‪Soon‬‬ ‫‪Low‬‬

‫‪118‬‬
 ‫‪a nap‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ‬

‫‪a shower‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺵ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a test-exam‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪Take‬‬ ‫‪a bath‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a dictation‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻜﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫‪a trip‬‬ ‫ﺳﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪a vehicle‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻬﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Hellen doesn’t behave the same kind as her father .‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪He types the letters faster than my secretery.‬‬

‫‪119‬‬
 ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪I never get up later than my parents .‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻭ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﺍﻭ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is a fast typist.‬‬

‫‪Hellen is fast.‬‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen types fast.‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪Hellen looks fast.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪friendly‬‬ ‫ﺻﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪lovely‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫‪deadly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮔﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪kingly‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‬

‫‪likely‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪worldy‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫‪motherly‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪fatherly‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﺭﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪sily‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻤﻘﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ugly‬‬ ‫ﺯﺷﺖ‬

‫‪sisterly‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬

‫‪Hellen is a friendly girl.‬‬

‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬

‫ﮔﻔﺖ ‪ friendlyLY‬ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Fashion‬‬
‫………… ‪In a/ an +‬‬ ‫‪Way‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‬

‫‪Manner‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺻﻤﻴﻤﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Hellen speaks in a friendly manner.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﻱ ﺳـﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳـﭗ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪as‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪not as/not so‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪as‬‬

‫‪Hellen types as slowly as Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen doesn’t type so/as slowly as Susan.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ more than‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen drives more slowly than Susan.‬‬

‫‪Hellen drives faster than Susan.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ) ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ( ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﻳـﺎ ﺑـﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﻼ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ "ﺗﺮﻳﻦ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ ly‬ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻠﺶ ‪ the most‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ly‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺵ ‪ the est‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen types the most slowly.‬‬

‫‪Hellen types the fastest.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﺗﺮﻳﻦ” ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫} ﻭﺟﻪ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ /‬ﺷﻜﻞ {‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ‪...........‬‬

‫‪122‬‬
 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪intensifiers :‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much, many‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠـﯽ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪much +‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪many +‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ many‬ﺍﺳـﻢ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ much‬ﻭ ‪ many‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫?‪Has Hellen written many letters‬‬

‫?‪Does Hellen drink much coffee‬‬
‫‪Helen has not written many letters.‬‬
‫‪Hellen doesn’t drink much coffee.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ a lot of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﭼـﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen has written a lot of letters.‬‬

‫‪Hellen drinks a lot of coffee.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ too‬ﻳﺎ ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Too‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ – ﺧﻴﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪+‬‬
‫‪Very‬‬

‫‪123‬‬
 ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬very ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬: too & very ‫ﻓﺮﻕ‬
:‫ﻼ‬

The park is very beautiful.

The teacher speaks very fluently.
: ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬too ‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬

It is too cold today.

That driver drives too slowly.

‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬many ‫ ﻭ‬much ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬too, very
:‫ﻼ‬

There were too many cars in the street.

Hellen drinks too much water in a day.
She knows very many words.
Thank you very much.

.‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬very , too ‫ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬، ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬enough ‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/ ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ enough

You are rich enough .

He speaks fluently enough .

‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬enough ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
:‫ﻼ‬

They spend enough money in a month .

: ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

Little ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
Few

124
 ‫‪ : few & little‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I have little money in my pocket.‬‬

‫‪He knows few words.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ few‬ﻭ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ )‪(a‬‬

‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ – ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬
‫‪a few‬‬

‫‪I drink a little coffee after dinner.‬‬

‫‪He has a few books in his book case.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪all‬‬
‫‪plenty of – a great deal of – a lot of‬‬ ‫‪a lot of – a large number of – plenty of‬‬

‫‪most‬‬ ‫‪most‬‬

‫‪much‬‬ ‫‪many‬‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪some‬‬

‫‪-------‬‬ ‫‪several‬‬

‫‪a little‬‬ ‫‪a few‬‬

‫‪little‬‬ ‫‪few‬‬

‫‪no‬‬

‫‪125‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪She Spends little money and I spend much.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ‬

‫‪126‬‬
 ‫‪Such‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen hasn't said such words.‬‬

‫‪Helen doesn't like such weather.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Such a/an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Such a child can't stay quiet.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Such‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪Such a/an +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫‪I haven’t seen such an interesting film so far.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Such‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪So +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ a an +‬‬

‫‪I haven't seen so interesting a film so far.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ‪ Very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪a + Very +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+‬‬

‫‪127‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﺬﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺷﻤﺰﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻡ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﻐﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﭼﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﻛﺎﺏ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺼﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺒﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺑﻨﻮﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪128‬‬
 enough ‫ و‬too ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

.‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬enough ‫ ﻳﺎ‬too ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬

.‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬:1

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

She is too young to work.

She drives too slowly to arrive on time.

‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬/‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬+ enough + to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.She is rich enough to buy the house.

2.They work hard enough to earn a lot of money.

.‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬:2

too + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The car is too expensive for me to buy.

2.You speak too fast for me to under stand.

‫ ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ enough + for ‫ ﺷﺨﺺ‬+ to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬

1.The book is easy enough for us to read.

2.You sigh beautifully enough for them to enjoy.

129
 ‫»‪«Other‬‬ ‫»ﺩﻳﮕﺮ«‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪John has polished other shoes too.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪This child wants another toy.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ )ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪ the other‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I don't like this hat. I like the other hat.‬‬

‫‪I don't like these shoes but I like the other shoes.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪another +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻌﻴﻦ ‪Other+‬‬ ‫‪Ö‬‬ ‫‪the other‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫‪the other‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ one‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ones‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪another one‬‬
‫‪other ones‬‬ ‫‪the other one‬‬
‫‪the other ones‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ another‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I don't like this hat, I like the other. Hat.‬‬

‫‪This child wants another hat.‬‬

‫‪130‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪) the other‬ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ )‪ (S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ـ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ → ‪others‬‬

‫)ﺍﻭﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺎ( ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ → ‪The others‬‬

‫‪I don't like these shoes. I Like the others.‬‬

‫‪John has polished others too.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ other‬ﻭ ‪ another‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪each other‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ‪ -‬ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪one another‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻛﺲ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺣﻤﺪ ﻣﺮﺍ ﻣـﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﮔﻔﺘـﻪ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﻤـﺪ ﻭ ﻣـﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Ahmad and I know each other.‬‬

‫‪People must help one another.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ together‬ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ـ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to gather‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷـﺘﺒﺎﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen and jane study together.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ other‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺩﻳﮕﺮ« ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪every other days = on alternate days‬‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪the other day = some days ago‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

‫‪other wise = or else‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻـ ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪on the other hand = in other words‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪131‬‬
‫‪other than = except‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬

‫‪one after another = one by one‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﻢ ﻳﻜﺮﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ـ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﻬﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﻄﻔﹰﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﺑﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪132‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ ﮔﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﻔﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻗﻠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺟﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺣﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪11‬ـ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﭼﻤﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪12‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻡ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪13‬ـ ﺗﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪14‬ـ ﭘﺴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪133‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Isn’t this the largest building in this area‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He had picked the most beautiful flower from this garden.‬‬
‫‪3‬ـ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺮﺵ ﺑﺎﻫﻮﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen isn't so/as intelligent as her sister.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﺵ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is supposed to take the most expensive present for his father.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Mr. Smith is the fastest typist in this office.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪Our house is more expensive than the house that you have bought.‬‬
‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He used to live in the smallest house in this street.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I could drive the longest road in this country for 24 hours.‬‬
‫‪9‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪134‬‬
I think, your shoes are cheaper than mine
.‫ـ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻡ‬10

This is the most interesting present that I have bought.

135
 ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪Relative Pronouns‬‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ Link‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ‪) +‬ﻛﻪ( ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﭘﺲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺎﺻـﻴﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ )ﻙ ـ ﻩ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴـﻲ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ who‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man.‬‬ ‫‪The man works here.‬‬

‫‪…the man who works here.‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ whom‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪I know the man.‬‬

‫‪…the man whom I know.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The bus‬‬ ‫‪The bus stops here everyday.‬‬

‫‪…the bus which stops here everyday.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ which‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The book‬‬ ‫‪I study the book.‬‬

‫‪…the book which I study.‬‬
‫‪5‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ where‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The house.‬‬ ‫‪they live in it.‬‬

‫‪the house where they live ( in ).‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪136‬‬
 ‫‪6‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ when‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The year.‬‬ ‫‪I was born in the year.‬‬

‫‪The year when I was born.‬‬
‫‪7‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺁﻥ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪his wife works with me.‬‬

‫‪…The man whose wife works with me.‬‬
‫‪…The dog whose name was Top‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪the dog the name of which was top of.‬‬

‫‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whose‬ﺍﺯ ‪ of which‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫…‪The room whose door‬‬

‫…‪The room the door of which‬‬
‫‪8‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ whose‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ The thing‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠـﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ‪ The thing which‬ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ what‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪The thing which you need is fresh air.‬‬

‫‪What you need is fresh air.‬‬
‫‪10‬ـ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ why‬ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The reason.‬‬ ‫‪I study English for that reason.‬‬

‫‪The reason why I study English is that I want to go abroad.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ The reason why‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ‬

‫ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ That‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ‪. because‬‬

‫‪137‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ »ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ )‪ ،(who‬ﻫﻤـﺔ ﺿـﻤﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ They‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ Those‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I who work hard.‬‬ ‫‪we who work hard‬‬

‫‪You who work hard.‬‬ ‫‪you who work hard‬‬
‫‪It who works hard.‬‬
‫‪She who works hard.‬‬ ‫‪Those who work hard.‬‬
‫‪He who works hard.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‪ 3 ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ whom ، who‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﺑـﺎ ‪that‬‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪The man who works here is my uncle.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The man whom you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The house which is on the corner is mine.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬

‫‪that‬‬

‫‪ .2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ »ﻛﻪ« ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ whom‬ﻭ ‪) which‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫‪The man which you saw yesterday wants you.‬‬

‫‪The house which you bought is too expensive.‬‬

‫‪ .3‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (necessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ )‪ (defining‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪a writer is a person.‬‬

‫‪138‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ‪ Person‬ﺑﻔﻬﻤﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻭﺻـﻔﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪a writer is a person who writes novel.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ none defining‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hafez is a great poet.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺣـﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻـﺪ ﺿـﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (unnecessary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hafez who lives in Shiraz, is a great poet.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ )‪ (unnecessary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ )‪ (،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﺸـﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﺔ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ none defining‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ‬

‫‪ defining‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪139‬‬
 ‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻓﻘﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬ـ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺰﺩﻡ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺗﻮ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪140‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﻧﺸـﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪to do‬‬ ‫‪ does-did‬ـ‬

‫‪to have‬‬ ‫‪ has-had‬ـ‬
‫‪to be‬‬ ‫‪ am-is-are-was-were‬ـ‬
‫‪to need‬‬ ‫ـ ـ‬
‫‪can‬‬ ‫‪ Could‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ‬

‫‪may‬‬ ‫‪ Might‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪must‬‬ ‫ـ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪shall‬‬ ‫‪ Should‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪will‬‬ ‫‪ Would‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﹰﺎ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ ought to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ to be supposed to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ had better‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ would rather‬ـ‬

‫ـ‬ ‫‪ have to‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )‪ (can, may, shall, will, must‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻳﺸﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﮔﻮﻳﻨـﺪ‬

‫)‪.(modal‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ would-should-might-could‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﺳـﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ‪،‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪141‬‬
‫‪1‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ(‬

‫‪Bob can come now. → Bob can come tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪Bob could come now. → Bob could come tomorrow.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Bob could come yesterday.‬‬

‫‪I knew that Bob could come.‬‬
‫‪2‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ـ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen should be resting.‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Hellen Shouldn’t be resting.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪It may be raining.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ can , must , may‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪Hellen must have seen the film. .‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬

‫ﻼ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪142‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺘـﻲ ‪ might-ought to-should-could-would‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﺣﺎﺻـﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﺔ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪could ‬‬
‫‪should ‬‬
‫)ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ( ‪would  + have P.P‬‬
‫‪might ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ought to ‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪I should have gone there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑـﺎﻻ‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ not‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪I shouldn’t have gone there.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺭﻓﺘﻢ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﻱ ﻛﻤﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻤﺸﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻱ ﺟﻴﺒﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪143‬‬
 ‫‪4‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻮﻫﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬ـ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪6‬ـ ﺗﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻭﻧﻢ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬ـ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪8‬ـ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻡ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬ـ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻔﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪10‬ـ ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪144‬‬
 ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺘـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻴﺮﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I will have graduated from high school by next year.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﺿﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Reza will have returned home by five o’clock.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Subject + will have + Past Participle‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ← )‪ (By tomorrow‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪By +‬‬

‫‪in ‬‬
‫‪ two weeks‬‬ ‫‪2‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ←‬
‫‪within ‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ← ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪4‬ـ‬

‫‪by the time‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪before‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪as soon as‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+‬‬

‫‪when‬‬

‫‪145‬‬
 ‫‪Conditionals‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ )‪ (main clause‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪if +‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻣـﺎ )ﻭ(‬

‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ + if +‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ـ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫‪if +‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪If Helen has money, she can buy the car.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Possible‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪146‬‬
 ‫‪2‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬

‫‪if +‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫‪If Helen had money now, she could buy the car.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﻧﺴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬

‫ﺷﺮﻃﻲ )‪ (imaginary‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪if +‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫‪have + P.P‬‬ ‫‪ + have + P.P‬ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

‫‪If Hellen had had money, she could have bought the book yesterday.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻠﻦ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧـﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻳﺎ )‪ (impossible‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I had money today, I would buy this book.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I had money yesterday , I would have bought this car.‬‬

‫‪147‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻴـﺎﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﺔ ﻧﺸـﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪she doesn't try if she tried , she would succeed.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪She didn't try, if she had tried , she would have succeeded.‬‬

‫‪148‬‬
 ‫» ﻭﺍﻻ«‬ ‫‪Otherwise‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ if clause‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪They didn’t invite me, If they had invited me, I would have gone.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪They didn’t invite me; other wise, I would have gone.‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷـﺮﻃﻲ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪They don't invite me, other wise, I would go.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ otherwise‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Don’t smoke, otherwise, you will get used to it.‬‬

‫‪149‬‬
 ‫ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ـ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ‬ ‫» ‪« Wish‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish to see them.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I want to see them.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ wish‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺵ ـ ﻛﺎﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺘﻤﻲ ﻭﻳﻘﻴﻨـﻲ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺟـﺰﺀ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬

‫‪1‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ‪ would‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I wish they would call me tomorrow.‬‬

‫‪2‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I wish They called me now.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺵ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺯﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺭﺯﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪I wish They had called me yesterday.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ wish‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪150‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪if‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪on condition‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ Suppose‬‬
‫‪  Pr ovided‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫‪ Pr oviding‬‬ ‫‪Suppo sin g‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫‪I will sign the contract provided you give me some money.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪ if‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Suppose it rained now ، I would stay home.‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ» ‪« It is time‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ ﺗـﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫـﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪it’s time + to‬‬

‫‪it’s time to finish the job.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪it is time +‬‬

‫‪it’s time you finished the job.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺸﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻨﻲ‬

‫‪151‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪IF‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﺔ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ Should‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪If I should see him, I will tell him.‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Should‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ if‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪Should I see him. I will tell him.‬‬

‫‪(2‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ were‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪If you were here, I would talk to you.‬‬

‫‪Were you here, I would talk to you.‬‬

‫‪(3‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ had‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺣـﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫‪if I had gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬

‫‪Had I gone there, I would have seen him.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ Should :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﹰﻻ« ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ if‬ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪If I should see him now, I would tell him.‬‬

‫‪Should I see him now, I would tell him.‬‬

‫‪152‬‬
 ‫‪Unless‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪ (if clause‬ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ not‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﻜﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪You won't succeed if you don't try.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻱ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪You won’t succeed unless you try.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ unless‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ if‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﮐﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪If not = unless‬‬

‫‪If = unless not‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Unless you don’t try, you will succeed = Unless you try, you won't succeed.‬‬

‫‪153‬‬
 ‫‪Would rather‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ Prefer‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ would rather‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ prefer‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ‪:‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Prefer‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer to stay there.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather stay there.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer to go rather than to stay.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + rather than + to‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather go than stay.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + than +‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ‪ + would rather +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )‪ (2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘـﹰﺎ ﺑـﺎ ‪ would rather‬ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ ﺑﻠﻜـﻪ ﺑـﺎ‬

‫‪ prefer‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer walking to staying.‬‬

‫‪I prefer apple to banana.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + to +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪154‬‬
‫‪(3‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I Prefered to go.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + Prefer + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather have gone.‬‬

‫‪ + would rather + have P.P‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪(4‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ Prefer‬ﻭ ‪ would rather‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I prefer him to go.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + to‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ + prefer +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫‪I would rather him went.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪+ would rather +‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪+‬‬

‫‪155‬‬
 ‫‪as if – as though‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ـ ﮔﻮﻳﻲ« ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴـﺖ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﭙﻨﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He behaves as if he didn’t like his wife.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﻏﻴﺮﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪She speaks as if she knew the problem.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ as if‬ﻭ ‪ as thought‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪He walked as if he had had a broken leg.‬‬

‫ﺍﻭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪156‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻪ( » ‪« in Case‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺒﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I take an umbrella with me in case it rains.‬‬

‫‪ :In case‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻣﺮ‬

‫‪Helen has left the door open, in case Her mother comes earlier.‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ + {incase} +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪/‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬

‫‪She was running fast in case she missed the class.‬‬

‫‪157‬‬
 ‫‪Both‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪both of‬‬ ‫‪the‬‬

‫‪‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪both the  +‬‬
‫‪both‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪both of +‬‬

‫‪Both students study hard.‬‬

‫‪Both of us study hard.‬‬
‫‪(2‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students both study hard.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + both‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students can both study hard.‬‬

‫‪ + to be + both‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪The students are both studying hard.‬‬

‫‪ both -‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪158‬‬
 ‫‪active & passive voice :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Voice‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ active‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻭ ‪ passive‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ passive‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ active‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ) ‪ ( Subject‬ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ doer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪Hellen studies the book . .‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ‪Subject‬‬

‫‪ Sufferer‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is seen by them.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬

‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ‪ neither doer not sufferer‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Hellen is a student.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ sufferer‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ‪ Subject‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪159‬‬
‫ﻼ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬

‫‪ participle‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪present participle‬‬
‫‪Participle‬‬
‫‪Past participle‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪live‬‬ ‫‪Æ living = alive‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪run Æ‬‬ ‫‪running‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﮔﺰﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﮊﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ed‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪wash‬‬ ‫‪Æ washed‬‬ ‫ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪fall‬‬ ‫‪Æ‬‬ ‫‪fallen‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﻧﻤـﻲ‬

‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I go with him .‬‬

‫‪160‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ go‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ him‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ go‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ with‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ – ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼـﺪﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪To be + p p‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﻭ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫‪:‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺏ ( ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Subject sufferer‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She ----------.‬‬

‫‪161‬‬
 ‫ﺝ ( ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ by‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She ----------- by him.‬‬

‫ﺩ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She -----------told by him.‬‬
‫ﻫـ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p . p‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪He tells her.‬‬

‫‪She is told by him.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻻ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺐ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪162‬‬
 ‫‪ -8‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﻳﺸﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1694‬ﻛﺸﻒ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺁﻣﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ‪ 80‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﻘﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪163‬‬
 ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-1

Helen tells Bob Æ Bob is told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-2

Helene told Bob Æ Bob was told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬-3

Helen will tell Bob Æ Bob will be told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-4

Helen is telling Bob Æ Bob is being told by Helen.

:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬-5

Helen was telling Bob Æ Bob was being told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-6

Helen has told Bob Æ Bob has been told by Helen.

:‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-7

Helen will have told Bob Æ Bob will have been told by Helen.
:‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬-8

Helen had told Bob Æ Bob had been told by Helen.

‫ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ‬،‫ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬،‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4 ‫ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬16 ‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬

. ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬

164
 ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫? ‪Did Hellen study the book‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪The book was studied by Hellen .‬‬

‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Was the book studied by Hellen‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫? ‪Where did Hellen take the book‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺳـﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Was the book taken by Helen.‬‬

‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ) ‪ ( whom,who‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫?‪Where was the book taken by Helen‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ‪ who‬ﻭ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ whom‬ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺨـﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘـﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ who‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫?‪Whom did Helen invite‬‬

‫?‪Who was invited by Helen‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ‪ who‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬

‫?‪Who saw Helen‬‬

‫‪165‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛـﻪ ﭼـﻮﻥ ‪ by whom‬ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫?‪By whom was bob seen‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﭘﺲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻳﺰﺍﻱ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺗﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﺭﻡ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪166‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen often visits john.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪John is often visited by Helen.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen writes letters carefully.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ p.p‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪The letters are carefully written by Helen.‬‬

‫‪: just -2‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ‪ just‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ have‬ﻳﺎ ‪ had‬ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Helen has just written the letter.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ just‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ be‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ‪ p.p‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪The letter has just been written by Helen.‬‬

‫‪167‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺁﻥ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﻠﻴﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻧﺪ؟‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻋﻮﺕ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﻳﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻥ ﭘﺪﺭﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I write the letter to him.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪168‬‬
‫‪The letter is written to him by me.‬‬
‫‪He is written the letter by me.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I saw Helen play.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻴﺰﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ subject suffer‬ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ‪to‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen was seen to play.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ + be + p.p‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪let +‬‬

‫‪Open the door Æ let the door be opened.‬‬

‫‪169‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣـﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻴﺪﻭﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﻡ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎ ﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻛﺲ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )ﺑﺮﻫﻨﻪ( ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my brother polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ get‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I get my brother to polish my shoes.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺁﻫﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪170‬‬
 ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻛﻔﺎﺵ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻛﻔﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺍﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺵ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻫﻠﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﺗﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﻲ ﻣﺄﻣﻮﺭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ + have/get +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ‬

‫‪I have my shoes polished.‬‬

‫‪171‬‬
 ‫‪reported speach‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺳـﺨﻦ ﻳـﺎ‬

‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ) ‪( direct speech‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺴـﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘـﻞ‬

‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “I live in Tehran”.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫”?‪Helen says, “where do you live‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen says, “open the window”.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen says, “what a nice car it is‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Helen says.‬‬

‫‪“Where do you live?” Helen says.‬‬
‫‪“Open the window,” Helen says.‬‬
‫‪“What a nice car it is!” Helen says.‬‬
‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪“I live in Tehran,” Says she.‬‬

‫‪172‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪Indirect speech‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺨﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻔﺘﺔ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said, “I live in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ comma‬ﻭ ﻛﻮﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ) ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘـﻞ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ ‪ that‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ ( ﺑـﺪﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫… ‪Helen said that‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said that she ...‬‬

‫ﺝ( ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said that she lived in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﺩ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷـﮕﺮ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 12‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪(1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen said to bob, “I know your father”.‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father.‬‬

‫‪ (2‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪My father said to me, “I am listening to you.‬‬

‫‪My father told me that he was listening to me.‬‬

‫‪173‬‬
 ‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬3
:‫ﻼ‬

The boy said to the girl, “I haven’t seen your book.”

The boy told the girl that he hadn’t seen her book.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬4

:‫ﻼ‬

My friend said, “I have been living here for ten years.”

My friend said that he had been living here for ten years.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬5

:‫ﻼ‬

The man said to the woman, “I will see you.”

The man told the woman that he would see her.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬6

:‫ﻼ‬

Ahmad said, “I will be working on Friday.”

Ahmad said that he would be working on Friday morning.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬7

:‫ﻼ‬

Bob said, “I will have finished the book on April.”

Bob said that he would have finished the book on April.

:‫ ﻣﺜﻼ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬8

Bob said, “I will have been studying for two years by April.”
Bob said that he would have been studying for two years by April.

‫ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬.‫( ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬9

:‫ﻼ‬

My father said to me, “I saw your umberella.”

My father told me that he had seen my umberella.

174
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﮕـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺒـﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪My father told me that he saw my umberella.‬‬

‫‪ (10‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Bob said, “I was listening to the music.‬‬

‫‪Bob said that he had been listening to music.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫”‪The woman said, “I had left home.‬‬

‫‪The woman said that she had left home.‬‬

‫”‪Bob said, “I had been playing for two hours.‬‬

‫‪Bob said that he had been playing for two hours.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒـﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ) ‪ ( reporting tag‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ say to‬ﻳﺎ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to/told Bob, “I know your father.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣّﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ‪ say to‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ tell‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob that she knew his father‬‬

‫‪175‬‬
 ‫» ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ «‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫”?‪Helen said to me, “where do you live‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ) ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ( ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ‪ wh‬ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen asked me where I lived.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭼﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺠﺎ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺱ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﺴﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺶ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺸﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-9‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪-10‬ﺑﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪176‬‬
 ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫”?‪Helen said to Bob, “do you live in Tehran‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ‪ if‬و ‪ whether‬ﻫـﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑـﻪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪Helen asked Bob if he lived in Tehran.‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ask‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ if‬ﻭ ‪ whether‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺆﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ )‪ (to‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( not to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door.‬‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “don’t open the door.‬‬
‫‪Helen told Bob not to open the door.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫”‪Helen said to Bob, “open the door before you come in.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen told Bob to open the door before he comes in.‬‬

‫‪177‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻢ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺗﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺪﻩ ﻛﻔﺸﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻫﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﻭﺳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺷﻠﻮﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺰﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﺎﺿﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺩ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﭘﻠﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺯﺩ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻬﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺑﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻧﺪ ﭼﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﭘﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺷﻠﻮﻍ ﻓﻮﺗﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ‬

‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪178‬‬
 The following + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
next + ‫→ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ The next + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ after

The + ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬+ before

last + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ →
The + previous + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

today → that day

tonight → that night
now → then
here → there
come → go
this → that

Helen said to Bob, “I will meet you next week.”

Helen told Bob that she would meet him the next week.

179
 ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫!‪What a nice car it is‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪what + a/an +‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫! ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪how +‬‬

‫!‪How slowly she drives‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺠﺒﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫”!‪Helen said, “how slowly the man works‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺑﺠﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ what‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ how‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫‪Helen exclaimed how slowly the man worked.‬‬

‫‪180‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ) ‪( gerund‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪live‬‬ ‫‪Æ living‬‬ ‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪be Æ‬‬ ‫‪being‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺴﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ . to‬ﺩﻟﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪After locking the door, I left home.‬‬

‫‪She is afraid of telling lies.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪To swim here is enjoyable.‬‬

‫‪Swimming here is enjoyable.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪avoid‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪defer‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ – ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪appreciate‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪delay‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪admit‬‬ ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪advise‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺤﻴﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪discuss‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪detest‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫‪consider‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪enjoy‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪can’t help‬‬ ‫ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪finish‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪181‬‬
‫‪deny‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪forgive‬‬ ‫ﻋﻔﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪forbid‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻏﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪include‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪imagine‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪keep‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪mention‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪oppose‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻔﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪mind‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪quit‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪postpone‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪risk‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫‪practice‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪remember‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪resume‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪stop‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫‪suggest‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪tolerate‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪understand‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ‬

‫‪I enjoy reading the newspaper.‬‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫‪I appreciate her speaking.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate Helen’s speaking.‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﺶ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻡ ﺑﺪﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪182‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻮﮒ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺶ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺮﺵ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺱ ﻛﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﻔﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ )‪ (′s‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate her working.‬‬

‫‪I appreciate Helen’s working.‬‬

‫‪183‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪:to‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ prefer‬ﻭ ‪ start‬ﻭ ‪ plan‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪to‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪Helen prefers to go.‬‬

‫‪Helen prefers going.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ remember , stop‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺷﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻴﺸـﺎﻥ ﻓـﺮﻕ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺸﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I stop speaking to the man.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬

‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I stopped to speak to the man.‬‬

‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen remembers locking the door.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ remember‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ remember‬ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﺑﺎ ) ‪ ( not forget‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻼ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﻫﻠﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Helen remembers to lock the door.‬‬

‫‪184‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ‬

‫‪she parked the car. She went shopping.‬‬ ‫ﻼ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜ ﹰ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻓـﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ‪(Present .‬‬

‫)‪ prefect‬ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪Have + ing + p.p‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪( after ) having parked the car, she went shopping.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬

‫‪185‬‬